blob: 23f2a5ecf669011ec5a448d46979b95e3dcaa466 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02008 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2016 Intel Deutschland GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07009 *
10 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
11 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
12 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
13 */
14
15#ifndef MAC80211_H
16#define MAC80211_H
17
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050018#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070019#include <linux/kernel.h>
20#include <linux/if_ether.h>
21#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070023#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020024#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070025
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040026/**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35/**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070039 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010042 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070046 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070047 */
48
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040049/**
50 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070051 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040052 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56/**
57 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070058 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040059 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070071 */
72
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020073/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040074 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +010088/**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
102 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
108 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
109 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
110 *
111 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
112 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
113 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
114 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
115 * .release_buffered_frames().
116 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
117 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
118 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
119 */
120
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -0500121struct device;
122
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -0400123/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200124 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
125 *
126 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100127 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200128 */
129enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200130 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +0100131 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200132};
133
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200134#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
135
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200136/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800137 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
138 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
139 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
142 */
143enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
144 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
145 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
146 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
147 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
148};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200149#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800150
151/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400152 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
153 *
154 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100155 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400156 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400157 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200158 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
159 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400160 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100161 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300162 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200163 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400164 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700165struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200166 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100167 u16 cw_min;
168 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200169 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300170 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200171 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700172};
173
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700174struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
175 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
176 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
178 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
179};
180
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100181/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200182 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100183 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
187 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200188 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200189 */
190enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100191 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200196};
197
198/**
199 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
200 *
201 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
202 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
203 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100204 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200205 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200206 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
207 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
208 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
209 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100210 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100211 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200212 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
213 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
214 */
215struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100216 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200217 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200218
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200219 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
220
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100221 bool radar_enabled;
222
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100223 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200224};
225
226/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300227 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
228 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
229 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
230 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
231 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
232 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
233 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
234 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
235 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
236 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
237 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
238 * for changes/removal.)
239 */
240enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
241 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
243};
244
245/**
246 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
247 *
248 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
249 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
250 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
251 * done.
252 *
253 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
254 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
255 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
256 */
257struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
258 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
261};
262
263/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100264 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
265 *
266 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
267 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
268 *
269 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
270 * also implies a change in the AID.
271 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700274 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200275 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
278 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
280 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
282 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200283 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200284 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300285 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200286 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
287 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200288 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200289 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200290 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300291 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200292 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100293 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
294 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300295 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
296 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100297 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
298 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
299 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100300 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200301 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100302 */
303enum ieee80211_bss_change {
304 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
305 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
306 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300307 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200308 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200309 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200310 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200311 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
312 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
313 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200314 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200315 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300316 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200317 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200318 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300319 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200320 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300321 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200322 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100323 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300324 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100325 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100326 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200327 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200328
329 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100330};
331
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300332/*
333 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
334 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
335 * filtering will be disabled.
336 */
337#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
338
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100339/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200340 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
341 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200342 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300343 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300344 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
345 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
346 * once each time the timeout triggers.
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700347 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200348enum ieee80211_event_type {
349 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200350 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300351 BAR_RX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300352 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200353};
354
355/**
356 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
357 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
358 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
359 */
360enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700361 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
362 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
363};
364
365/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200367 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
368 */
369struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
370 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
371};
372
373/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200374 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
375 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200376 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200377 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
378 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200379 */
380enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
381 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200382 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha90faa92015-03-16 23:23:37 +0200383 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
384 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200385};
386
387/**
388 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
389 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
390 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
391 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
392 */
393enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
394 MLME_SUCCESS,
395 MLME_DENIED,
396 MLME_TIMEOUT,
397};
398
399/**
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200400 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200401 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
402 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
403 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
404 */
405struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
406 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
407 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
408 u16 reason;
409};
410
411/**
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300412 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
413 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
414 * @tid: the tid
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300415 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300416 */
417struct ieee80211_ba_event {
418 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
419 u16 tid;
420 u16 ssn;
421};
422
423/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200424 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
Jonathan Corbeta839e462015-04-13 18:27:35 +0200425 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200426 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200427 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbachb497de62015-04-20 22:53:38 +0300428 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300429 * @u:union holding the fields above
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200430 */
431struct ieee80211_event {
432 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
433 union {
434 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200435 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +0300436 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200437 } u;
438};
439
440/**
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200441 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
442 *
443 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
444 *
445 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
446 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
447 */
448struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
449 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
450 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
451};
452
453/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
455 *
456 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
457 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
458 *
459 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200460 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
461 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530462 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100463 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
464 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Bergea1b2b452015-06-02 20:15:49 +0200465 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
466 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100467 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200468 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300469 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200470 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
472 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
473 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
474 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200475 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200476 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
477 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200478 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100479 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
480 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200481 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
482 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
483 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700484 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800485 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200486 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
487 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
488 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300489 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100490 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200491 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
492 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100493 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
494 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200495 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100496 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Avri Altman22f66892015-08-18 16:52:07 +0300497 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
498 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
499 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200500 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
Johannes Berge86abc62015-10-22 17:35:14 +0200501 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
502 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
503 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200504 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300505 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
506 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
507 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
508 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100509 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
510 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
511 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200512 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200513 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
514 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
515 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300516 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
517 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200518 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300519 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
520 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200521 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100522 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
523 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
524 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
525 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
526 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
527 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100528 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100529 */
530struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200531 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100532 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200533 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530534 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100535 u16 aid;
536 /* erp related data */
537 bool use_cts_prot;
538 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300539 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200540 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800541 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700542 u16 beacon_int;
543 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200544 u64 sync_tsf;
545 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100546 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100547 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300548 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100549 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200550 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200551 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
552 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100553 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Sara Sharon23a1f8d2015-12-08 16:04:31 +0200554 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300555 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100556 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200557 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200558 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300559 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300560 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
561 size_t ssid_len;
562 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200563 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100564 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100565 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100566};
567
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800568/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200569 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800570 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700571 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800572 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100573 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200574 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
575 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
576 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
577 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
578 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
579 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
580 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
581 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
582 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
583 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
584 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200585 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200586 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
587 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200588 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200589 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
590 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200591 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200592 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200593 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
594 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
595 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
596 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
597 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
598 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
599 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
600 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200601 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
602 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
603 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300604 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
605 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200606 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
607 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
608 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600609 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
610 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
611 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100612 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
613 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
614 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200615 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
616 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200617 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
618 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100619 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
620 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
621 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200622 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
623 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
624 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
625 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100626 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
627 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
628 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100629 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
630 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
631 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200632 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
633 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
634 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400635 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200636 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
637 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100638 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
639 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
640 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
641 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200642 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
643 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
644 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
646 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
647 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200648 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
649 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
650 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200651 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
652 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530653 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
654 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
655 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200656 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
657 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
658 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530659 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
660 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
661 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
662 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
663 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200664 *
665 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
666 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800667 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200668enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200669 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200670 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
671 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
672 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
673 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
674 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
675 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
676 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
677 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
678 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
679 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
680 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
681 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600682 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100683 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200684 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200685 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100686 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200687 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100688 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100689 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200690 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400691 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200692 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100693 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200694 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200696 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530699 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200700};
701
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200702#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
703
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200704/**
705 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
706 *
707 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
708 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530709 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
710 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100711 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200712 *
713 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
714 */
715enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
716 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530717 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Sven Eckelmanndfdfc2b2016-01-26 17:11:13 +0100718 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200719};
720
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200721/*
722 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
723 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
724 */
725#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
726 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
727 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
728 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
729 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100730 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200731 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200732 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200733
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530734/**
735 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
736 * Rate Control algorithm.
737 *
738 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
739 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
740 *
741 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
743 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
745 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100746 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
747 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530748 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
749 * Greenfield mode.
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100751 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
752 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
753 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530754 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
755 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
756 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
758 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200759enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
760 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
761 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
762 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
763
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100764 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200765 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
766 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
767 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
768 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
769 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100770 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
771 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
772 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800773};
774
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200775
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200776/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
777#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200778
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200779/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
780#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
781
782/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200783#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200784
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200785/* maximum number of rate table entries */
786#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
787
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200788/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200789 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200790 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200791 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
792 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200793 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200794 *
795 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
796 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
797 *
798 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
799 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200800 *
801 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
802 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
803 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
804 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
805 * information
806 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
807 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
808 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
809 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
810 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
811 * information should then contain
812 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
813 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
814 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200815 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200816struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
817 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100818 u16 count:5,
819 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000820} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200821
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100822#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
823
824static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
825 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
826{
827 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200828 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
829 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100830}
831
832static inline u8
833ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
834{
835 return rate->idx & 0xF;
836}
837
838static inline u8
839ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
840{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200841 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100842}
843
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200844/**
845 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200846 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200847 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
848 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
849 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
850 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
851 *
852 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200853 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200854 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100855 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700856 * @control: union for control data
857 * @status: union for status data
858 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100859 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700860 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100861 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700862 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200863 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200864 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200865struct ieee80211_tx_info {
866 /* common information */
867 u32 flags;
868 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200869
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200870 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100871
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100872 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100873
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200874 union {
875 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200876 union {
877 /* rate control */
878 struct {
879 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
880 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
881 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200882 u8 use_rts:1;
883 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200884 u8 short_preamble:1;
885 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200886 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200887 };
888 /* only needed before rate control */
889 unsigned long jiffies;
890 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200891 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200892 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
893 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200894 u32 flags;
895 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200896 } control;
897 struct {
Johannes Berg3b79af92015-06-01 23:14:59 +0200898 u64 cookie;
899 } ack;
900 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200901 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200902 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200903 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100904 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200905 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300906 u16 tx_time;
907 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200908 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200909 struct {
910 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
911 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200912 u8 pad[4];
913
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200914 void *rate_driver_data[
915 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
916 };
917 void *driver_data[
918 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200919 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700920};
921
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300922/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200923 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
924 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200925 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
926 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
927 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200928 *
929 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
930 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
931 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
932 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
933 */
934struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
935 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
936 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
937 const u8 *common_ies;
938 size_t common_ie_len;
939};
940
941
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200942static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
943{
944 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
945}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400946
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200947static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
948{
949 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
950}
951
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200952/**
953 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
954 *
955 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
956 *
957 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
958 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
959 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
960 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
961 *
962 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
963 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
964 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
965 */
966static inline void
967ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
968{
969 int i;
970
971 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
972 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
973 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
974 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
975 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
976 /* clear the rate counts */
977 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
978 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
979
980 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200981 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200982 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
983 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
984 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
985}
986
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400987
988/**
989 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
990 *
991 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
992 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
993 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
994 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400995 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
996 * verification has been done by the hardware.
997 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
998 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
999 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001000 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1001 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1002 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1003 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -04001004 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1005 * the frame.
1006 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1007 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001008 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +01001009 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1010 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1011 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001012 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1013 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1014 * (including FCS) was received.
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001015 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1016 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +02001017 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001018 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001019 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001020 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
1021 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +01001022 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1023 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001024 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
1025 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1026 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001027 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1028 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1029 * each A-MPDU
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001030 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1031 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1032 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1033 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1034 * on this subframe
1035 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1036 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001037 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001038 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1039 * processing it in any regular way.
1040 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1041 * them for sniffing purposes.
1042 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1043 * monitor interfaces.
1044 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1045 * them for sniffing purposes.
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001046 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001047 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
1048 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001049 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1050 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1051 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1052 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1053 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1054 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1055 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1056 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1057 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001058 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1059 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1060 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001061 */
1062enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001063 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1064 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergf4a0f0c2016-01-25 15:46:34 +02001065 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001066 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1067 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1068 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1069 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001070 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001071 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
1072 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
1073 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
1074 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
1075 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
1076 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
1077 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg981d94a2015-06-12 14:39:02 +02001078 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(15),
Sara Sharonf9cfa5f2015-12-08 16:04:33 +02001079 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001080 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
1081 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
1082 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
1083 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -08001084 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001085 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +02001086 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001087 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(24),
1088 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(25),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001089 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +02001090 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
1091 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +02001092 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001093 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001094};
1095
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001096#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1097
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001098/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001099 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1100 *
1101 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1102 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1103 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001104 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001105 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001106 */
Grzegorz Bajorski17883042015-12-11 14:39:46 +01001107
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001108enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1109 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001110 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1111 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001112};
1113
1114/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001115 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1116 *
1117 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1118 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001119 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001120 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001121 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1122 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001123 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1124 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001125 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001126 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Johannes Berg4352a4d2015-12-08 16:04:35 +02001127 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1128 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001129 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1130 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1131 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001132 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1133 * values were filled.
1134 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1135 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001136 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001137 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001138 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1139 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001140 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001141 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001142 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001143 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1144 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1145 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001146 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001147struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1148 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001149 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001150 u32 ampdu_reference;
1151 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001152 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001153 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001154 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001155 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001156 u8 rx_flags;
1157 u8 band;
1158 u8 antenna;
1159 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001160 u8 chains;
1161 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001162 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001163};
1164
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001165/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001166 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1167 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1168 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1169 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1170 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1171 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1172 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1173 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1174 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1175 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1176 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1177 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1178 * @data field.
1179 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1180 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1181 * length
1182 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1183 *
1184 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1185 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1186 * data.
1187 */
1188struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1189 u32 present;
1190 u8 align;
1191 u8 oui[3];
1192 u8 subns;
1193 u8 pad;
1194 u16 len;
1195 u8 data[];
1196} __packed;
1197
1198/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001199 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1200 *
1201 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1202 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001203 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1204 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1205 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001206 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1207 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1208 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1209 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1210 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1211 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1212 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001213 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1214 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1215 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1216 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1217 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001218 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1219 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001220 */
1221enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001222 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001223 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001224 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001225 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001226};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001227
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001228
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001229/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001230 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1231 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001232 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001233 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001234 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001235 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001236 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001237 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001238 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001239 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001240 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1241 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001242 */
1243enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001244 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001245 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001246 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001247 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001248 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1249 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1250 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001251 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001252};
1253
1254/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001255 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1256 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001257 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1258 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1259 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1260 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1261 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001262 */
1263enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1264 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1265 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1266 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1267 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1268
1269 /* keep last */
1270 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1271};
1272
1273/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001274 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1275 *
1276 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1277 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001278 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1279 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001280 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001281 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1282 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1283 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001284 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1285 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1286 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1287 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001288 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1289 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001290 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001291 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001292 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001293 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001294 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001295 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1296 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001297 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001298 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1299 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001300 *
1301 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1302 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001303 * configured for an HT channel.
1304 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1305 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001306 */
1307struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001308 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001309 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001310
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001311 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001312 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001313
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001314 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1315
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001316 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001317 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001318 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001319};
1320
1321/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001322 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1323 *
1324 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1325 * operation.
1326 *
1327 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1328 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1329 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1330 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001331 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1332 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001333 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1334 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001335 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001336 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1337 */
1338struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1339 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001340 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001341 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001342 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001343 u8 count;
1344};
1345
1346/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001347 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1348 *
1349 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1350 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001351 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1352 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1353 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1354 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001355 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1356 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1357 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1358 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001359 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1360 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1361 * this is not pure P2P vif.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001362 */
1363enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1364 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001365 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001366 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comb115b972015-10-27 08:38:40 +01001367 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001368};
1369
1370/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001371 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1372 *
1373 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1374 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1375 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001376 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001377 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1378 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001379 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001380 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1381 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001382 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1383 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1384 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001385 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1386 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1387 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1388 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001389 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1390 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001391 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1392 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1393 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1394 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1395 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001396 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001397 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001398 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001399 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1400 * interface.
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001401 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1402 * sizeof(void *).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001403 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001404 */
1405struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001406 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001407 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001408 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001409 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001410 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001411
1412 u8 cab_queue;
1413 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1414
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001415 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1416
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001417 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1418
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001419 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001420
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001421#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1422 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1423#endif
1424
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03001425 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1426
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001427 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001428 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001429};
1430
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001431static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1432{
1433#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001434 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001435#endif
1436 return false;
1437}
1438
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001439/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001440 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1441 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1442 *
1443 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1444 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1445 *
1446 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1447 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1448 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1449 */
1450struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1451
1452/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001453 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1454 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1455 *
1456 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1457 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1458 *
1459 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1460 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1461 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1462 */
1463struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1464
1465/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001466 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1467 *
1468 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1469 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1470 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001471 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1472 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001473 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1474 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001475 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1476 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1477 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001478 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1479 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001480 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001481 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1482 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001483 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001484 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001485 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001486 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1487 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1488 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001489 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1490 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1491 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1492 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1493 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1494 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1495 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001496 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001497 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001498 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001499 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1500 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1501 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001502 */
1503enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001504 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1505 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1506 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1507 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1508 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1509 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1510 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001511 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001512};
1513
1514/**
1515 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1516 *
1517 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1518 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1519 *
1520 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1521 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001522 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001523 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001524 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1525 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001526 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1527 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1528 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001529 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1530 * data block:
1531 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1532 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1533 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001534 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1535 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001536 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001537struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Bergdb388a52015-06-01 15:36:51 +02001538 atomic64_t tx_pn;
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001539 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001540 u8 icv_len;
1541 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001542 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001543 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001544 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001545 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001546 u8 key[0];
1547};
1548
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001549#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1550
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02001551#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1552#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1553
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001554/**
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001555 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1556 *
1557 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1558 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1559 * reverse order than in packet)
1560 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1561 * reverse order than in packet)
1562 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1563 * reverse order than in packet)
1564 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1565 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001566 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001567 */
1568struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1569 union {
1570 struct {
1571 u32 iv32;
1572 u16 iv16;
1573 } tkip;
1574 struct {
1575 u8 pn[6];
1576 } ccmp;
1577 struct {
1578 u8 pn[6];
1579 } aes_cmac;
1580 struct {
1581 u8 pn[6];
1582 } aes_gmac;
1583 struct {
1584 u8 pn[6];
1585 } gcmp;
Johannes Berga31cf1c2015-04-20 18:21:58 +02001586 struct {
1587 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1588 u8 seq_len;
1589 } hw;
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02001590 };
1591};
1592
1593/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001594 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1595 *
1596 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1597 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1598 *
1599 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1600 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1601 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1602 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1603 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1604 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1605 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1606 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1607 * key_idx value calculation:
1608 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1609 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1610 */
1611struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1612 u32 cipher;
1613 u16 iftype;
1614 u8 hdr_len;
1615 u8 pn_len;
1616 u8 pn_off;
1617 u8 key_idx_off;
1618 u8 key_idx_mask;
1619 u8 key_idx_shift;
1620 u8 mic_len;
1621};
1622
1623/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001624 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1625 *
1626 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1627 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1628 *
1629 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1630 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1631 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001632enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001633 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001634};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001635
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001636/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001637 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1638 *
1639 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1640 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1641 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1642 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1643 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1644 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1645 */
1646enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1647 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1648 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1649 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1650 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1651 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1652 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1653};
1654
1655/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001656 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1657 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1658 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1659 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1660 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1661 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1662 *
1663 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1664 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1665 */
1666enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1667 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1668 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1669 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1670 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1671};
1672
1673/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001674 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1675 *
1676 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001677 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001678 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1679 */
1680struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1681 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1682 struct {
1683 s8 idx;
1684 u8 count;
1685 u8 count_cts;
1686 u8 count_rts;
1687 u16 flags;
1688 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1689};
1690
1691/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001692 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1693 *
1694 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1695 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1696 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1697 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1698 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001699 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001700 *
1701 * @addr: MAC address
1702 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001703 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001704 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1705 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berg527871d2015-03-21 08:09:55 +01001706 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1707 * otherwise always false)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001708 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1709 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001710 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1711 * if wme is supported.
1712 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001713 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001714 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1715 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1716 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1717 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001718 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001719 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001720 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001721 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1722 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301723 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001724 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1725 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1726 * unlimited.
1727 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes. This
1728 * field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble. For packets
1729 * with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1730 * + If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1731 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1732 * + If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1733 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1734 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level driver.
1735 * This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001736 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001737 */
1738struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001739 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001740 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1741 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001742 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001743 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001744 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001745 u8 uapsd_queues;
1746 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001747 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001748 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001749 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001750 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001751 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001752 bool tdls_initiator;
Tamizh chelvam93f04902015-10-07 10:40:04 +05301753 bool mfp;
Emmanuel Grumbach506bcfa2015-12-13 15:41:05 +02001754 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1755 u16 max_amsdu_len;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001756
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001757 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1758
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001759 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001760 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001761};
1762
1763/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001764 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1765 *
1766 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301767 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001768 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001769 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1770 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1771 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001772enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001773 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1774};
1775
1776/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001777 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1778 *
1779 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1780 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1781 */
1782struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1783 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1784};
1785
1786/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001787 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1788 *
1789 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1790 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1791 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1792 * @ac: the AC for this queue
Johannes Bergf8bdbb52015-05-20 15:04:53 +02001793 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01001794 *
1795 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1796 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1797 */
1798struct ieee80211_txq {
1799 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1800 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1801 u8 tid;
1802 u8 ac;
1803
1804 /* must be last */
1805 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1806};
1807
1808/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001809 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1810 *
1811 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1812 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1813 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1814 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1815 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1816 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001817 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1818 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1819 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1820 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1821 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1822 * algorithm.
1823 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1824 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1825 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1826 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1827 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1828 * CCK frames.
1829 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001830 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1831 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1832 * the FCS at the end.
1833 *
1834 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1835 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1836 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1837 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1838 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1839 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001840 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001841 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001842 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1843 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1844 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1845 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1846 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001847 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1848 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1849 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1850 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1851 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001852 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1853 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1854 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301855 *
1856 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1857 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001858 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001859 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1860 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1861 *
1862 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1863 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1864 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1865 *
1866 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1867 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001868 *
1869 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1870 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001871 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301872 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1873 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1874 * the stack.
1875 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001876 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001877 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1878 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001879 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001880 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1881 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1882 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001883 *
1884 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1885 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1886 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1887 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1888 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1889 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001890 *
1891 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1892 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1893 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1894 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1895 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1896 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001897 *
1898 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1899 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1900 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001901 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001902 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1903 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1904 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001905 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001906 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1907 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1908 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1909 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001910 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1911 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1912 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1913 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1914 * supported cipher suites.
1915 *
Johannes Berg17c18bf2015-03-21 15:25:43 +01001916 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
1917 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
1918 * for frames.
1919 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001920 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1921 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1922 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1923 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001924 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001925 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1926 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1927 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001928 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1929 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1930 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001931 *
1932 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1933 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001934 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001935 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1936 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1937 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1938 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001939 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1940 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1941 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1942 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001943 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001944 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1945 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1946 *
Johannes Bergc526a462015-06-02 20:32:00 +02001947 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001948 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001949 *
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03001950 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
1951 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
1952 *
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03001953 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
1954 * within A-MPDU.
1955 *
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02001956 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
1957 * for sent beacons.
1958 *
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02001959 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
1960 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
1961 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
1962 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
1963 *
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02001964 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
1965 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
1966 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
1967 * timeout.
1968 *
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001969 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001970 */
1971enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02001972 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
1973 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
1974 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
1975 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
1976 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
1977 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
1978 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
1979 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
1980 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
1981 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
1982 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
1983 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
1984 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
1985 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
1986 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
1987 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
1988 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
1989 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
1990 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
1991 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
1992 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
1993 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
1994 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
1995 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
1996 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
1997 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
1998 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
1999 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2000 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
Arik Nemtsovb98fb442015-06-10 20:42:59 +03002001 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
Emmanuel Grumbach99e7ca42015-08-15 22:39:51 +03002002 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
Helmut Schaa35afa582015-09-09 09:46:32 +02002003 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
Johannes Berg31104892015-10-22 17:35:19 +02002004 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
Sara Sharon412a6d82015-12-08 19:09:05 +02002005 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002006
2007 /* keep last, obviously */
2008 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04002009};
2010
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002011/**
2012 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002013 *
2014 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2015 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2016 *
2017 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2018 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2019 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002020 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2021 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002022 *
2023 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2024 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002025 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2026 * along with this structure.
2027 *
2028 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2029 *
2030 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2031 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2032 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002033 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2034 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002035 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02002036 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002037 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002038 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002039 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002040 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002041 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002042 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02002043 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2044 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2045 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002046 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2047 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2048 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002049 *
2050 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2051 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002052 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2053 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002054 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2055 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002056 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2057 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002058 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002059 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2060 * can handle.
2061 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2062 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002063 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002064 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002065 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2066 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2067 * aggregation.
2068 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2069 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2070 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002071 *
2072 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
Gregory Greenmanac062192015-11-17 10:24:38 +02002073 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2074 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2075 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2076 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002077 *
2078 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2079 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002080 *
2081 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2082 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2083 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
2084 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002085 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002086 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2087 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2088 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
2089 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002090 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
Johannes Berg680a0da2015-04-13 16:58:25 +02002091 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2092 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002093 *
2094 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2095 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2096 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2097 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2098 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2099 * neither enabled.
2100 *
2101 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2102 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2103 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002104 *
2105 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2106 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2107 * supported by HW.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002108 *
2109 * @txq_ac_max_pending: maximum number of frames per AC pending in all txq
2110 * entries for a vif.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04002111 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002112struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002113 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002114 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01002115 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002116 void *priv;
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002117 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002118 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01002119 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01002120 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002121 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02002122 int chanctx_data_size;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002123 int txq_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002124 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08002125 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002126 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002127 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02002128 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002129 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02002130 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01002131 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002132 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02002133 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01002134 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03002135 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02002136 u8 uapsd_queues;
2137 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02002138 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2139 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01002140 int txq_ac_max_pending;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002141};
2142
Johannes Berg30686bf2015-06-02 21:39:54 +02002143static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2144 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2145{
2146 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2147}
2148#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2149
2150static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2151 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2152{
2153 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2154}
2155#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2156
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002157/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02002158 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2159 *
2160 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2161 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2162 */
2163struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2164 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2165
2166 /* Keep last */
2167 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2168};
2169
2170/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02002171 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2172 *
2173 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2174 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2175 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2176 * @status: channel-switch response status
2177 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2178 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2179 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2180 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2181 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2182 */
2183struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2184 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2185 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2186 u8 action_code;
2187 u32 status;
2188 u32 timestamp;
2189 u16 switch_time;
2190 u16 switch_timeout;
2191 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2192 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2193};
2194
2195/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002196 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2197 *
2198 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2199 *
2200 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2201 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2202 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2203 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2204 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01002205 *
2206 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08002207 */
2208struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2209
2210/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002211 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2212 *
2213 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2214 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2215 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002216static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2217{
2218 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2219}
2220
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002221/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002222 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002223 *
2224 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2225 * @addr: the address to set
2226 */
Bjorn Andersson538dc902015-12-24 00:33:26 -08002227static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07002228{
2229 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2230}
2231
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002232static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2233ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002234 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002235{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05002236 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002237 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002238 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002239}
2240
2241static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2242ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002243 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002244{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002245 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002246 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002247 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002248}
2249
2250static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2251ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002252 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002253{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002254 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002255 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002256 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002257}
2258
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002259/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002260 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2261 * @hw: the hardware
2262 * @skb: the skb
2263 *
2264 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2265 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2266 */
2267void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2268
2269/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002270 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002271 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002272 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2273 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2274 *
2275 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2276 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002277 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2278 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2279 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002280 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2281 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2282 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002283 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2284 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2285 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2286 *
2287 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2288 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2289 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2290 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2291 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002292 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2293 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2294 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2295 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2296 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002297 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2298 *
2299 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2300 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2301 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2302 * based on the receive flags.
2303 *
2304 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2305 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2306 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2307 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002308 *
2309 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2310 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2311 * handler.
2312 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002313 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002314 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2315 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002316 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002317 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002318 *
2319 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2320 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2321 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002322 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002323
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002324/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002325 * DOC: Powersave support
2326 *
2327 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2328 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002329 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2330 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2331 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2332 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2333 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2334 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2335 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2336 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002337 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002338 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2339 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2340 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002341 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2342 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002343 *
2344 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2345 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2346 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002347 *
2348 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2349 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2350 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2351 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002352 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2353 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002354 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002355 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002356 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2357 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2358 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2359 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2360 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2361 * periods.
2362 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002363 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002364 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2365 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2366 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2367 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2368 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2369 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2370 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2371 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2372 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2373 *
2374 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002375 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002376 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002377 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2378 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2379 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2380 *
2381 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2382 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002383 */
2384
2385/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002386 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2387 *
2388 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002389 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002390 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2391 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2392 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2393 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2394 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2395 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002396 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2397 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002398 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2399 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2400 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2401 *
2402 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2403 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2404 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2405 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2406 *
2407 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2408 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2409 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2410 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2411 * - a list of information element IDs
2412 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2413 *
2414 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2415 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2416 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2417 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2418 * vendor information elements.
2419 *
2420 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2421 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2422 *
2423 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2424 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2425 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2426 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2427 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2428 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2429 *
2430 *
2431 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2432 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2433 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2434 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2435 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2436 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2437 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2438 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2439 *
2440 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2441 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2442 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002443 */
2444
2445/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002446 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2447 *
2448 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2449 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2450 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2451 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2452 *
2453 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2454 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2455 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2456 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2457 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2458 * hardware flags.
2459 *
2460 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2461 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2462 * turned off otherwise.
2463 *
2464 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2465 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2466 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2467 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2468 */
2469
2470/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002471 * DOC: Frame filtering
2472 *
2473 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2474 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2475 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2476 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2477 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2478 *
2479 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2480 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2481 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2482 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002483 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2484 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2485 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2486 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2487 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2488 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2489 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002490 *
2491 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2492 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2493 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2494 * or dropped.
2495 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002496 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2497 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2498 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2499 * the flag, but not clear it.
2500 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2501 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2502 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2503 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2504 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2505 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2506 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2507 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002508 */
2509
2510/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002511 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2512 *
2513 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2514 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2515 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2516 *
2517 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2518 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2519 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2520 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2521 * the driver code.
2522 *
2523 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2524 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2525 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2526 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2527 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2528 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2529 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2530 *
2531 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2532 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2533 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2534 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2535 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2536 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2537 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2538 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2539 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2540 * @sta_notify callback.
2541 *
2542 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2543 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2544 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2545 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2546 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2547 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2548 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002549 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002550 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2551 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2552 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2553 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2554 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2555 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2556 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002557 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2558 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2559 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002560 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2561 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2562 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2563 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2564 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2565 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2566 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2567 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2568 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2569 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2570 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2571 *
2572 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2573 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2574 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2575 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2576 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2577 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2578 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2579 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2580 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2581 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002582 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002583 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2584 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2585 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2586 *
2587 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2588 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2589 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2590 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2591 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002592 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002593 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2594 *
2595 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2596 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2597 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2598 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002599 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002600 *
2601 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2602 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2603 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2604 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002605 */
2606
2607/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002608 * DOC: HW queue control
2609 *
2610 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2611 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2612 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2613 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2614 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2615 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2616 *
2617 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2618 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2619 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2620 *
2621 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2622 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2623 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2624 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2625 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2626 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2627 * the hardware queue.
2628 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2629 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2630 *
2631 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2632 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2633 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2634 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2635 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2636 *
2637 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2638 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2639 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2640 * off-channel queue: 9
2641 *
2642 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2643 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2644 *
2645 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2646 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2647 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2648 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2649 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2650 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2651 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2652 *
2653 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2654 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2655 *
2656 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2657 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2658 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2659 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2660 */
2661
2662/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002663 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2664 *
2665 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2666 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2667 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2668 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2669 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002670 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2671 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2672 * multicast address.
2673 *
2674 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2675 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2676 *
2677 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2678 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2679 *
2680 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2681 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2682 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2683 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2684 * honour this flag if possible.
2685 *
Johannes Bergdf140462015-04-22 14:40:58 +02002686 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2687 * station
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002688 *
2689 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002690 *
Jakub Kicinskic2d39552015-06-02 21:10:13 +02002691 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002692 *
2693 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002694 */
2695enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002696 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2697 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2698 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2699 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2700 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2701 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002702 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002703 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002704};
2705
2706/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002707 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2708 *
2709 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2710 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002711 *
2712 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2713 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002714 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002715 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2716 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002717 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2718 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2719 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002720 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002721 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2722 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2723 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2724 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2725 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2726 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2727 * session is gone and removes the station.
2728 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2729 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2730 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2731 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002732 */
2733enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2734 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2735 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002736 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002737 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2738 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2739 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002740 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002741};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002742
2743/**
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02002744 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2745 *
2746 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2747 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2748 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2749 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2750 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2751 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2752 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2753 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2754 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2755 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2756 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2757 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2758 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2759 */
2760struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2761 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2762 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2763 u16 tid;
2764 u16 ssn;
2765 u8 buf_size;
2766 bool amsdu;
2767 u16 timeout;
2768};
2769
2770/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002771 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2772 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002773 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2774 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002775 */
2776enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2777 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002778 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002779};
2780
2781/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002782 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2783 *
2784 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002785 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2786 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2787 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002788 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002789 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2790 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2791 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002792 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2793 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002794 */
2795enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2796 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2797 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002798 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002799 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002800};
2801
2802/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002803 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2804 *
2805 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2806 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2807 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2808 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2809 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2810 *
2811 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2812 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2813 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2814 */
2815enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2816 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2817 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2818};
2819
2820/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002821 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2822 *
2823 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2824 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2825 *
2826 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2827 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2828 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2829 * of wowlan configuration)
2830 */
2831enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2832 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2833 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2834};
2835
2836/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002837 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2838 *
2839 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2840 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2841 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2842 *
2843 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2844 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2845 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002846 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002847 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002848 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002849 *
2850 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2851 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2852 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2853 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2854 * or zero.
2855 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2856 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2857 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002858 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002859 *
2860 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2861 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2862 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2863 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002864 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2865 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002866 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002867 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002868 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2869 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2870 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2871 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2872 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002873 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2874 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2875 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2876 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002877 *
2878 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2879 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2880 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2881 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2882 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2883 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002884 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2885 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2886 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2887 * in suspend().
2888 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002889 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002890 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002891 * and @stop must be implemented.
2892 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2893 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2894 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2895 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2896 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002897 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002898 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002899 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2900 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2901 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2902 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2903 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2904 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002905 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2906 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2907 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2908 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2909 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2910 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2911 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002912 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002913 *
2914 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2915 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002916 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002917 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002918 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002919 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2920 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2921 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2922 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2923 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002924 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2925 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002926 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002927 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2928 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2929 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2930 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002931 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2932 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002933 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002934 *
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03002935 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
2936 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
2937 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
2938 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
2939 * which flags are changed.
2940 * This callback can sleep.
2941 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002942 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002943 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002944 *
2945 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002946 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2947 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002948 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002949 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002950 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002951 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002952 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2953 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2954 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002955 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002956 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002957 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2958 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2959 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2960 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2961 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2962 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002963 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2964 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2965 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2966 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002967 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002968 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002969 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2970 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002971 * that power save is disabled.
2972 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2973 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2974 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2975 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2976 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2977 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2978 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002979 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002980 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002981 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2982 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2983 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2984 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2985 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2986 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2987 * The callback can sleep.
2988 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002989 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2990 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2991 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2992 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2993 *
2994 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002995 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002996 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002997 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2998 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002999 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3000 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3001 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003002 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003003 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3004 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3005 * this notification.
3006 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01003007 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003008 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3009 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003010 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003011 *
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003012 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3013 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3014 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003015 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003016 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003017 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3018 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
3019 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
3020 * The callback can sleep.
3021 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003022 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003023 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003024 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003025 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3026 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3027 *
3028 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003029 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3030 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3031 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3032 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3033 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003034 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303035 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3036 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3037 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3038 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
3039 *
3040 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
3041 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
3042 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003043 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003044 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3045 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3046 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01003047 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003048 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3049 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3050 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3051 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003052 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3053 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3054 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3055 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3056 * The callback can sleep.
3057 *
3058 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3059 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3060 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3061 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3062 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003063 * The callback can sleep.
3064 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003065 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3066 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3067 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3068 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3069 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3070 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3071 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003072 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3073 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3074 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003075 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003076 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3077 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3078 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3079 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3080 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3081 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3082 * The callback can sleep.
3083 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003084 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02003085 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003086 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003087 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003088 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003089 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003090 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003091 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003092 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01003093 *
3094 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02003095 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01003096 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003097 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003098 *
3099 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3100 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3101 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3102 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003103 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003104 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003105 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3106 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3107 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003108 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003109 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02003110 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003111 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
3112 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3113 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003114 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
Sara Sharonfad47182015-12-08 16:04:34 +02003115 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003116 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02003117 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3118 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3119 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3120 * - TX: 1.....7
3121 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
3122 * - TX: 8..1...
3123 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3124 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3125 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
3126 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3127 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05003128 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02003129 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003130 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07003131 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3132 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003133 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3134 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3135 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01003136 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003137 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003138 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3139 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003140 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3141 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3142 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01003143 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003144 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3145 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003146 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01003147 *
3148 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003149 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3150 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3151 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3152 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003153 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01003154 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003155 *
3156 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3157 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3158 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3159 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003160 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09003161 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3162 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3163 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3164 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3165 *
3166 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003167 *
3168 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3169 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3170 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3171 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3172 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3173 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003174 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02003175 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3176 * must be accepted in this case.
3177 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01003178 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3179 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003180 *
3181 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3182 *
3183 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303184 *
3185 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3186 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303187 *
3188 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3189 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3190 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003191 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3192 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
Emmanuel Grumbach63822462015-04-20 22:53:37 +03003193 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003194 *
3195 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3196 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3197 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3198 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09003199 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003200 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3201 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3202 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3203 * more-data bit must always be set.
3204 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3205 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02003206 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3207 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3208 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3209 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3210 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3211 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003212 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3213 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3214 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02003215 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3216 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003217 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003218 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003219 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003220 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3221 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3222 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01003223 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003224 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3225 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3226 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3227 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02003228 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01003229 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003230 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3231 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3232 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003233 *
3234 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3235 *
3236 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3237 *
3238 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3239 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3240 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003241 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3242 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3243 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3244 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3245 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3246 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3247 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3248 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3249 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3250 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3251 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3252 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003253 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003254 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3255 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3256 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3257 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3258 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3259 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3260 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3261 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3262 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003263 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303264 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003265 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303266 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003267 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3268 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3269 * channel context with different settings
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303270 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003271 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3272 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303273 * This callback may sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003274 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3275 * unbound from vif.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303276 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003277 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3278 * another, as specified in the list of
3279 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3280 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
Chaitanya T Kdcae9e02015-10-30 23:16:15 +05303281 * This callback may sleep.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003282 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003283 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3284 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3285 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3286 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3287 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3288 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3289 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003290 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003291 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3292 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3293 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3294 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3295 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003296 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003297 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3298 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3299 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003300 *
3301 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3302 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3303 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003304 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003305 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3306 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003307 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003308 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003309 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3310 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003311 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3312 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3313 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3314 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003315 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3316 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3317 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003318 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003319 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3320 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3321 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3322 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003323 *
3324 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3325 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3326 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003327 *
3328 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3329 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003330 *
3331 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3332 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3333 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3334 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3335 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3336 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3337 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3338 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3339 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003340 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3341 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3342 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3343 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3344 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3345 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3346 * the function call.
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003347 *
3348 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003349 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003350struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003351 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3352 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3353 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003354 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003355 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003356#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3357 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3358 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003359 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003360#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003361 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003362 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003363 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3364 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003365 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003366 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003367 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003368 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003369 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3370 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3371 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3372 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003373
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003374 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3375 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3376
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003377 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003378 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003379 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3380 unsigned int changed_flags,
3381 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003382 u64 multicast);
Andrei Otcheretianski1b09b552015-08-15 22:39:50 +03003383 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3384 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3385 unsigned int filter_flags,
3386 unsigned int changed_flags);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003387 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3388 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003389 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003390 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003391 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003392 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003393 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3394 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3395 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3396 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003397 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3398 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3399 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003400 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3401 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003402 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003403 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003404 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3405 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003406 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3407 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3408 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003409 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003410 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003411 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003412 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3414 const u8 *mac_addr);
3415 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003417 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3418 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg9352c192015-04-20 18:12:41 +02003419 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3420 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3421 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003422 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003423 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003424 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3425 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3426 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3427 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303428#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3429 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3430 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3431 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3432 struct dentry *dir);
3433 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3434 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3435 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3436 struct dentry *dir);
3437#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003438 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003439 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003440 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3441 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3442 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3443 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003444 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3445 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3446 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003447 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3450 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003451 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3452 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3453 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003454 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3455 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3456 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3457 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003458 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003459 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003460 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003461 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3462 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3463 u64 tsf);
3464 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003465 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003466 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003467 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Sara Sharon50ea05e2015-12-30 16:06:04 +02003468 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003469 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3470 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003471 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003472 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003473#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003474 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3475 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003476 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3477 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3478 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003479#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003480 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3481 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003482 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003483 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003484 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003485 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3486 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003487
3488 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003489 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003490 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003491 int duration,
3492 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003493 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003494 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3495 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3496 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303497 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303498 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3499 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003500 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3501 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3502 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003503
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003504 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3505 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3506 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3507 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3508 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003509 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3511 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3512 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3513 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003514
3515 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3516 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3517 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3520 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3521 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3522 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003523
3524 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3525 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003526
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003527 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3529
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003530 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3531 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3532 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3533 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3534 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3535 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3536 u32 changed);
3537 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3539 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3540 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3541 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3542 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003543 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3544 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3545 int n_vifs,
3546 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003547
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003548 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3549 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003550
3551#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3552 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3554 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3555#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003556 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3557 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3558 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003559 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3560 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3561 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003562
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003563 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3564 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3565
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003566 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3567 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003568 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003569 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3570 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003571
3572 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3573 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3574 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3575 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003576 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003577 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3578 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3579 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003580 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3581 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3582 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01003583
3584 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3585 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003586};
3587
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003588/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003589 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3590 *
3591 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3592 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3593 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3594 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3595 * @priv_data_len.
3596 *
3597 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3598 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3599 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3600 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3601 *
3602 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3603 */
3604struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3605 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3606 const char *requested_name);
3607
3608/**
3609 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003610 *
3611 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3612 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3613 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3614 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3615 * @priv_data_len.
3616 *
3617 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3618 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003619 *
3620 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003621 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003622static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003623struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003624 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3625{
3626 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3627}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003628
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003629/**
3630 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3631 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003632 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3633 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3634 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003635 *
3636 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003637 *
3638 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003639 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003640int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3641
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003642/**
3643 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3644 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3645 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3646 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3647 */
3648struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3649 int throughput;
3650 int blink_time;
3651};
3652
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003653/**
3654 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3655 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3656 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3657 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3658 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3659 */
3660enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3661 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3662 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3663 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3664};
3665
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003666#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003667const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3668const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3669const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3670const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3671const char *
3672__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3673 unsigned int flags,
3674 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3675 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003676#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003677/**
3678 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3679 *
3680 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3681 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3682 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3683 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3684 *
3685 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003686 *
3687 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003688 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003689static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003690{
3691#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3692 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3693#else
3694 return NULL;
3695#endif
3696}
3697
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003698/**
3699 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3700 *
3701 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3702 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3703 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3704 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3705 *
3706 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003707 *
3708 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003709 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003710static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003711{
3712#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3713 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3714#else
3715 return NULL;
3716#endif
3717}
3718
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003719/**
3720 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3721 *
3722 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3723 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3724 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3725 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3726 *
3727 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003728 *
3729 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003730 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003731static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003732{
3733#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3734 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3735#else
3736 return NULL;
3737#endif
3738}
3739
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003740/**
3741 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3742 *
3743 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3744 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3745 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3746 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3747 *
3748 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003749 *
3750 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003751 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003752static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003753{
3754#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3755 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3756#else
3757 return NULL;
3758#endif
3759}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003760
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003761/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003762 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3763 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003764 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003765 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3766 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3767 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003768 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3769 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3770 *
3771 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003772 */
Johannes Bergf5c4ae02015-04-23 12:09:01 +02003773static inline const char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003774ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003775 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3776 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3777{
3778#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003779 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003780 blink_table_len);
3781#else
3782 return NULL;
3783#endif
3784}
3785
3786/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003787 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3788 *
3789 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3790 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3791 *
3792 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3793 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003794void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3795
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003796/**
3797 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3798 *
3799 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3800 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003801 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003802 *
3803 * @hw: the hardware to free
3804 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003805void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3806
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003807/**
3808 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3809 *
3810 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3811 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3812 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3813 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3814 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3815 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3816 *
3817 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3818 */
3819void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3820
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003821/**
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003822 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003823 *
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003824 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
3825 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3826 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3827 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3828 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
3829 *
3830 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3831 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3832 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
3833 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3834 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
3835 *
3836 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
3837 *
3838 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3839 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3840 * @napi: the NAPI context
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003841 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003842void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3843 struct napi_struct *napi);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003844
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003845/**
3846 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3847 *
3848 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003849 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3850 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3851 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3852 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003853 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003854 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003855 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3856 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003857 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3858 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003859 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003860 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003861 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003862 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3863 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003864 */
Johannes Bergaf9f9b22015-06-11 16:02:32 +02003865static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
3866{
3867 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, skb, NULL);
3868}
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003869
3870/**
3871 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3872 *
3873 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003874 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3875 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003876 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003877 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3878 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003879 *
3880 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3881 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003882 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003883void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003884
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003885/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003886 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3887 *
3888 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3889 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3890 *
3891 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003892 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3893 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003894 *
3895 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3896 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3897 */
3898static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3899 struct sk_buff *skb)
3900{
3901 local_bh_disable();
3902 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3903 local_bh_enable();
3904}
3905
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003906/**
3907 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3908 *
3909 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3910 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3911 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3912 *
3913 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3914 *
3915 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3916 * each other.
3917 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003918 * @sta: currently connected sta
3919 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003920 *
3921 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003922 */
3923int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3924
3925/**
3926 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3927 * (in process context)
3928 *
3929 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3930 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3931 * applies.
3932 *
3933 * @sta: currently connected sta
3934 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003935 *
3936 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003937 */
3938static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3939 bool start)
3940{
3941 int ret;
3942
3943 local_bh_disable();
3944 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3945 local_bh_enable();
3946
3947 return ret;
3948}
3949
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003950/*
3951 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3952 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3953 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003954#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003955
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003956/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003957 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003958 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003959 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3960 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003961 *
3962 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003963 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3964 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003965 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003966 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3967 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3968 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3969 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3970 *
3971 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3972 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3973 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3974 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3975 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3976 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3977 *
3978 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3979 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3980 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3981 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3982 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003983 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003984void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3985 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003986
3987/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003988 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3989 *
3990 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3991 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3992 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3993 *
3994 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3995 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3996 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3997 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3998 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3999 */
4000void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4001 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4002 struct sk_buff *skb,
4003 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4004 int max_rates);
4005
4006/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004007 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4008 *
4009 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4010 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4011 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4012 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004013 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4014 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004015 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02004016 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4017 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004018 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004019 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4020 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004021 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004022void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004023 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004024
4025/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01004026 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4027 *
4028 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4029 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4030 * specific skbs.
4031 *
4032 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4033 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4034 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4035 *
4036 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4037 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4038 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4039 * @info: tx status information
4040 */
4041void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4042 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4043 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4044
4045/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004046 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4047 *
4048 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4049 *
4050 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4051 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4052 * for a single hardware.
4053 *
4054 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4055 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4056 */
4057static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4058 struct sk_buff *skb)
4059{
4060 local_bh_disable();
4061 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4062 local_bh_enable();
4063}
4064
4065/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004066 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004067 *
4068 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4069 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4070 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01004071 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4072 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004073 *
4074 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4075 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01004076 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004077void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004078 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004079
4080/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004081 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4082 *
4083 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4084 * connected STA.
4085 *
4086 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4087 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4088 */
4089void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4090
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004091#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4092
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03004093/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004094 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4095 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4096 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03004097 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4098 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4099 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004100 */
4101struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4102 u16 tim_offset;
4103 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004104
4105 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004106};
4107
4108/**
4109 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4110 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4111 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4112 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4113 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4114 *
4115 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4116 * obtain the beacon template.
4117 *
4118 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4119 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004120 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4121 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004122 *
4123 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4124 *
4125 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4126 */
4127struct sk_buff *
4128ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4129 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4130 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4131
4132/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004133 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4134 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004135 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004136 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4137 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4138 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4139 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4140 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4141 *
4142 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004143 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004144 *
4145 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4146 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03004147 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4148 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004149 *
4150 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004151 *
4152 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004153 */
4154struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4155 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4156 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4157
4158/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004159 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4160 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004161 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004162 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004163 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004164 *
4165 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004166 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01004167static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4169{
4170 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4171}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004172
4173/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03004174 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4175 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4176 *
4177 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4178 * This function is called implicitly when
4179 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4180 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4181 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4182 *
4183 * Return: new csa counter value
4184 */
4185u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4186
4187/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004188 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4189 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4190 *
4191 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004192 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004193 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4194 */
4195void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4196
4197/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02004198 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02004199 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4200 *
4201 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4202 */
4203bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4204
4205
4206/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004207 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4208 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4209 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4210 *
4211 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4212 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4213 *
4214 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004215 *
4216 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02004217 */
4218struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4220
4221/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004222 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4223 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4224 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4225 *
4226 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4227 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4228 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4229 *
4230 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4231 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004232 *
4233 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004234 */
4235struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4236 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4237
4238/**
4239 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4240 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4241 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4242 *
4243 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4244 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4245 * BSSID and address is used.
4246 *
4247 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4248 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004249 *
4250 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02004251 */
4252struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4254
4255/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004256 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4257 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004258 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004259 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4260 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004261 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004262 *
4263 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4264 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004265 *
4266 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004267 */
4268struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02004269 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004270 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01004271 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02004272
4273/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004274 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4275 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004276 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004277 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4278 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004279 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004280 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4281 *
4282 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4283 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4284 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4285 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4286 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004287void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004288 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004289 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004290 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4291
4292/**
4293 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4294 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004295 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004296 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004297 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004298 *
4299 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4300 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4301 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004302 *
4303 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004304 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004305__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4306 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004307 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004308
4309/**
4310 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4311 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004312 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004313 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4314 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004315 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004316 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4317 *
4318 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4319 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4320 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4321 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4322 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004323void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4324 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004325 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004326 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004327 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4328
4329/**
4330 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4331 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004332 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004333 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004334 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004335 *
4336 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4337 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4338 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004339 *
4340 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004341 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004342__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4343 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004344 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004345 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004346
4347/**
4348 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4349 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004350 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004351 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004352 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004353 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004354 *
4355 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4356 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004357 *
4358 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004359 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004360__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4361 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004362 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004363 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004364 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004365
4366/**
4367 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4368 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004369 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004370 *
4371 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4372 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4373 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4374 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004375 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4376 *
4377 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4378 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004379 *
4380 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4381 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4382 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4383 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4384 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4385 * use common code for all beacons.
4386 */
4387struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004388ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004389
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004390/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004391 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4392 *
4393 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4394 *
4395 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4396 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4397 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4398 */
4399void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4400 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4401
4402/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004403 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004404 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004405 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4406 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004407 *
4408 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004409 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4410 * with this P1K
4411 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004412 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004413static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4414 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4415{
4416 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4417 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4418 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4419
4420 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4421}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004422
4423/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004424 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4425 *
4426 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4427 * and transmitter address.
4428 *
4429 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4430 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4431 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4432 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4433 */
4434void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4435 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4436
4437/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004438 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4439 *
4440 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4441 * in the packet.
4442 *
4443 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4444 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4445 * encrypted with this key
4446 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4447 */
4448void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4449 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004450
4451/**
Eliad Pellerf8079d42016-02-14 13:56:35 +02004452 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4453 *
4454 * @pos: start of crypto header
4455 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4456 * @pn: PN to add
4457 *
4458 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4459 * the packet payload)
4460 *
4461 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4462 * point to the crypto header)
4463 */
4464u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4465
4466/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004467 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4468 *
4469 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004470 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004471 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4472 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4473 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4474 *
4475 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4476 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4477 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4478 *
4479 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4480 * can be done concurrently.
4481 */
4482void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4483 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4484
4485/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004486 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4487 *
4488 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004489 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004490 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4491 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4492 * @seq: new sequence data
4493 *
4494 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4495 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4496 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4497 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4498 *
4499 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4500 * can be done concurrently.
4501 */
4502void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4503 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4504
4505/**
4506 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4507 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4508 *
4509 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4510 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4511 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4512 *
4513 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4514 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4515 */
4516void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4517
4518/**
4519 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4520 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4521 * @keyconf: new key data
4522 *
4523 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4524 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4525 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4526 *
4527 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4528 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4529 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4530 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4531 *
4532 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4533 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4534 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4535 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4536 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4537 * of the reconfiguration.
4538 *
4539 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4540 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4541 *
4542 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4543 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4544 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4545 * the key that's being replaced.
4546 */
4547struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4548ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4549 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4550
4551/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004552 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4553 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4554 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4555 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4556 * @gfp: allocation flags
4557 */
4558void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4559 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4560
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004561/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004562 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4563 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4564 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4565 *
4566 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4567 */
4568void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4569
4570/**
4571 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4572 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4573 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4574 *
4575 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4576 */
4577void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4578
4579/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004580 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4581 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4582 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4583 *
4584 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004585 *
4586 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004587 */
4588
4589int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4590
4591/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004592 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4593 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4594 *
4595 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4596 */
4597void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4598
4599/**
4600 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4601 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4602 *
4603 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4604 */
4605void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4606
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004607/**
4608 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4609 *
4610 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4611 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004612 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4613 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004614 *
4615 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004616 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004617 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004618void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004619
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004620/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004621 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4622 *
4623 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4624 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4625 *
4626 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4627 */
4628void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4629
4630/**
4631 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4632 *
4633 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4634 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4635 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4636 * while associating, for instance.
4637 *
4638 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4639 */
4640void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4641
4642/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004643 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4644 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4645 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4646 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4647 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4648 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4649 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4650 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004651 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004652 */
4653enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4654 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4655 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004656 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004657};
4658
4659/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004660 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4661 *
4662 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4663 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4664 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4665 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4666 *
4667 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4668 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4669 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4670 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4671 */
4672void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4673 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4674 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4675 void *data);
4676
4677/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004678 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004679 *
4680 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4681 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004682 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4683 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4684 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004685 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004686 *
4687 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004688 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004689 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004690 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4691 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004692static inline void
4693ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4694 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4695 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4696 void *data)
4697{
4698 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4699 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4700 iterator, data);
4701}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004702
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004703/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004704 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4705 *
4706 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4707 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4708 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4709 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004710 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004711 *
4712 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004713 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004714 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4715 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4716 */
4717void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004718 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004719 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4720 u8 *mac,
4721 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4722 void *data);
4723
4724/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004725 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4726 *
4727 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4728 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4729 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4730 *
4731 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4732 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4733 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4734 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4735 */
4736void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4737 u32 iter_flags,
4738 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4739 u8 *mac,
4740 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4741 void *data);
4742
4743/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004744 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4745 *
4746 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4747 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4748 * function for them.
4749 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4750 *
4751 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4752 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4753 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4754 */
4755void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4756 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4757 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4758 void *data);
4759/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004760 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4761 *
4762 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4763 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4764 *
4765 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4766 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4767 */
4768void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4769
4770/**
4771 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4772 *
4773 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4774 * workqueue.
4775 *
4776 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4777 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4778 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4779 */
4780void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4781 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4782 unsigned long delay);
4783
4784/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004785 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004786 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004787 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304788 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004789 *
4790 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004791 *
4792 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4793 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4794 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4795 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304796int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4797 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004798
4799/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004800 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004801 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004802 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4803 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4804 *
4805 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004806 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4807 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004808 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004809void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004810 u16 tid);
4811
4812/**
4813 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004814 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004815 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004816 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004817 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004818 *
4819 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4820 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4821 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4822 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004823int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004824
4825/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004826 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004827 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004828 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4829 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4830 *
4831 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004832 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4833 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004834 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004835void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004836 u16 tid);
4837
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004838/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004839 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4840 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004841 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004842 * @addr: station's address
4843 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004844 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4845 *
4846 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004847 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4848 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004849struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004850 const u8 *addr);
4851
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004852/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004853 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004854 *
4855 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004856 * @addr: remote station's address
4857 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004858 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004859 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4860 *
4861 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004862 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4863 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004864 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4865 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4866 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4867 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4868 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4869 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4870 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004871 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004872 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004873 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004874struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4875 const u8 *addr,
4876 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004877
4878/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004879 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4880 * @hw: the hardware
4881 * @pubsta: the station
4882 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4883 *
4884 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4885 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4886 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4887 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4888 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4889 *
4890 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4891 * manner.
4892 *
4893 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4894 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4895 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4896 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4897 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4898 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4899 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4900 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4901 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4902 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4903 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4904 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4905 * woke up while blocked or not.
4906 */
4907void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4908 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4909
4910/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004911 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4912 * @pubsta: the station
4913 *
4914 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4915 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4916 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4917 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4918 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004919 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4920 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4921 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4922 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4923 *
4924 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4925 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4926 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4927 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004928 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004929void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004930
4931/**
Emmanuel Grumbach0ead2512015-11-17 10:24:36 +02004932 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
4933 * @pubsta: the station
4934 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
4935 *
4936 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
4937 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
4938 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
4939 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
4940 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
4941 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
4942 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
4943 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
4944 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
4945 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
4946 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
4947 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
4948 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
4949 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
4950 */
4951void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
4952
4953/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004954 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4955 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4956 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4957 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4958 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4959 *
4960 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4961 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4962 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4963 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4964 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4965 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004966 *
4967 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4968 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4969 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004970 */
4971void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4972 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4973 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4974 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4975 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4976 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4977 void *data),
4978 void *iter_data);
4979
4980/**
Eliad Pelleref044762015-11-17 10:24:37 +02004981 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
4982 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4983 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4984 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4985 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4986 *
4987 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4988 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4989 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
4990 * in removal process will be skipped.
4991 *
4992 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
4993 * and thus iter must be atomic.
4994 */
4995void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4997 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4998 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4999 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5000 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5001 void *data),
5002 void *iter_data);
5003
5004/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005005 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5006 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5007 * @iter: iterator function
5008 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5009 *
5010 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5011 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5012 * places while calling into the driver.
5013 *
5014 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5015 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5016 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01005017 *
5018 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5019 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5020 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5021 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02005022 */
5023void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5024 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5025 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5026 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5027 void *data),
5028 void *iter_data);
5029
5030/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005031 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5032 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5033 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5034 *
5035 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5036 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5037 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5038 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5039 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005040 * %NULL.
5041 *
5042 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02005043 */
5044struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5046
5047/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005048 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5049 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01005050 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005051 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005052 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005053 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02005054 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5055 */
5056void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005057
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005058/**
5059 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5060 *
5061 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5062 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01005063 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005064 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5065 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01005066 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5067 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02005068 *
5069 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5070 * without connection recovery attempts.
5071 */
5072void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5073
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005074/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02005075 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5076 *
5077 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5078 *
5079 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5080 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5081 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5082 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5083 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5084 *
5085 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5086 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5087 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5088 * disconnect normally later.
5089 *
5090 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5091 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5092 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5093 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5094 */
5095void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5096
5097/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005098 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5099 * rssi threshold triggered
5100 *
5101 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5102 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5103 * @gfp: context flags
5104 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01005105 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02005106 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5107 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5108 */
5109void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5110 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5111 gfp_t gfp);
5112
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005113/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01005114 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5115 *
5116 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5117 * @gfp: context flags
5118 */
5119void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5120
5121/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01005122 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5123 *
5124 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5125 */
5126void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5127
5128/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02005129 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5130 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5131 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5132 *
5133 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5134 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5135 */
5136void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5137
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005138/**
5139 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5140 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02005141 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02005142 *
5143 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5144 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5145 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5146 */
5147void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5148 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5149
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02005150/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01005151 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5152 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5153 */
5154void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5155
5156/**
5157 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5158 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5159 */
5160void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5161
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03005162/**
5163 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5164 *
5165 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5166 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5167 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5168 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5169 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5170 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5171 *
5172 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5173 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5174 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5175 */
5176void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5177 const u8 *addr);
5178
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005179/**
Sara Sharon06470f72016-01-28 16:19:25 +02005180 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5181 * @pubsta: station struct
5182 * @tid: the session's TID
5183 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5184 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5185 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5186 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5187 *
5188 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5189 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5190 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5191 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5192 */
5193void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5194 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5195 u16 received_mpdus);
5196
5197/**
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02005198 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5199 *
5200 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5201 * buffer.
5202 *
5203 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5204 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5205 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5206 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5207 */
5208void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5209
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02005210/**
5211 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5212 *
5213 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5214 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5215 * reordering.
5216 *
5217 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5218 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5219 *
5220 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5221 * @addr: station mac address
5222 * @tid: the rx tid
5223 */
5224void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5225 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5226
5227/**
5228 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5229 *
5230 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5231 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5232 * reordering.
5233 *
5234 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5235 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5236 *
5237 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5238 * @addr: station mac address
5239 * @tid: the rx tid
5240 */
5241void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5242 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
5243
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005244/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005245
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005246/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005247 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005248 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005249 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5250 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5251 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005252 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5253 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005254 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5255 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5256 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5257 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5258 * RTS threshold
5259 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5260 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005261 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005262 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
5263 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01005264 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005265 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005266 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005267 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005268struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5269 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5270 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5271 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5272 struct sk_buff *skb;
5273 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5274 bool rts, short_preamble;
5275 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02005276 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02005277 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01005278 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005279};
5280
5281struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005282 const char *name;
5283 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005284 void (*free)(void *priv);
5285
5286 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5287 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005288 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305290 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005291 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005292 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5293 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005294 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5295 void *priv_sta);
5296
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005297 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5298 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5299 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5300 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005301 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5302 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5303 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005304 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5305 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005306
5307 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5308 struct dentry *dir);
5309 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005310
5311 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005312};
5313
5314static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5315 enum ieee80211_band band,
5316 int index)
5317{
5318 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5319}
5320
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005321/**
5322 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5323 *
5324 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5325 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5326 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5327 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5328 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5329 * not null.
5330 *
5331 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5332 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5333 *
5334 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5335 * that this may be null.
5336 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5337 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5338 */
5339bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5340 void *priv_sta,
5341 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5342
5343
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005344static inline s8
5345rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5346 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5347{
5348 int i;
5349
5350 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5351 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5352 return i;
5353
5354 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005355 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005356
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005357 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005358 return 0;
5359}
5360
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005361static inline
5362bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5363 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5364{
5365 unsigned int i;
5366
5367 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5368 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5369 return true;
5370 return false;
5371}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005372
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005373/**
5374 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5375 *
5376 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5377 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5378 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5379 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5380 *
5381 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5382 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5383 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5384 */
5385int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5386 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5387 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5388
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005389int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5390void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005391
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005392static inline bool
5393conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5394{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005395 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005396}
5397
5398static inline bool
5399conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5400{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005401 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5402 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005403}
5404
5405static inline bool
5406conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5407{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005408 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5409 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005410}
5411
5412static inline bool
5413conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5414{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005415 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005416}
5417
5418static inline bool
5419conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5420{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005421 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5422 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5423 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005424}
5425
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005426static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5427ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5428{
5429 if (p2p) {
5430 switch (type) {
5431 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5432 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5433 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5434 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5435 default:
5436 break;
5437 }
5438 }
5439 return type;
5440}
5441
5442static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5443ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5444{
5445 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5446}
5447
Sara Sharon65554d02016-02-16 12:48:17 +02005448/**
5449 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5450 *
5451 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5452 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5453 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5454 *
5455 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5456 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5457 * matching GroupId management frame.
5458 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5459 */
5460void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5461 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5462
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005463void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5464 int rssi_min_thold,
5465 int rssi_max_thold);
5466
5467void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005468
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005469/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005470 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005471 *
5472 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5473 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005474 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5475 *
5476 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5477 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005478 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005479int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5480
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005481/**
5482 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5483 * @vif: virtual interface
5484 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5485 * @gfp: allocation flags
5486 *
5487 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5488 */
5489void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5490 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5491 gfp_t gfp);
5492
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005493/**
5494 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5495 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5496 * @vif: virtual interface
5497 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5498 * @band: the band to transmit on
5499 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5500 *
5501 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5502 */
5503bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5505 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5506
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005507/**
5508 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5509 *
5510 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5511 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5512 *
5513 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5514 *
5515 * private:
5516 *
5517 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5518 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5519 */
5520struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5521 u32 next_tsf;
5522 bool has_next_tsf;
5523
5524 u8 absent;
5525
5526 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5527 struct {
5528 u32 start;
5529 u32 duration;
5530 u32 interval;
5531 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5532};
5533
5534/**
5535 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5536 *
5537 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5538 * @data: NoA tracking data
5539 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5540 *
5541 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5542 */
5543int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5544 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5545
5546/**
5547 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5548 *
5549 * @data: NoA tracking data
5550 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5551 */
5552void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5553
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005554/**
5555 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5556 * @vif: virtual interface
5557 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5558 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5559 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5560 * @gfp: allocation flags
5561 *
5562 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5563 */
5564void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5565 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5566 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005567
5568/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005569 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5570 *
5571 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5572 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5573 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5574 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5575 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5576 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5577 *
5578 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5579 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5580 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5581 *
5582 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5583 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5584 *
5585 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5586 */
5587int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5588
5589/**
5590 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5591 *
5592 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5593 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5594 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5595 *
5596 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5597 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5598 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5599 *
5600 * @sta: the station
5601 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5602 */
5603void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5604
5605/**
Felix Fietkauba8c3d62015-03-27 21:30:37 +01005606 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5607 *
5608 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5609 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5610 *
5611 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5612 */
5613struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5614 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
Michal Kaziorf2ac7e32016-01-27 15:26:12 +01005615
5616/**
5617 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5618 *
5619 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5620 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5621 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5622 *
5623 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5624 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5625 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5626 */
5627void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5628 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5629 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005630#endif /* MAC80211_H */